ENGLISH ENGLISH www.lg.com USER GUIDE GT540 GT540 P/N : MMBB0381602(1.0) WR P/N : MMBB0381602(1.0) WR GT540_Iran_IRQ_Cover_1.0_0702_CS3.indd 1 www.lg.com 2010.7.
Bluetooth QD ID B016480 GT540_Iran_IRQ_Cover_1.0_0702_CS3.indd 2 2010.7.
GT540 User Guide • Some of the contents of this manual may not apply to your phone depending on your phone’s software or your service provider. • This handset has a touch screen keypad and is not recommended for people with impaired vision. • Copyright ©2010 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact GT540 phone by LG, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.indd 2 2010.7.
Contents Guidelines for safe and efficient use.............................................. 6 Important notice....................... 10 1. Phone memory.................... 10 2. Optimising Battery Life......... 10 3. Installing an Open Source OS.. 11 4. Using Unlock pattern ........... 11 5. Using Safe Mode and Hard Reset.................................. 11 6. Connecting to Wi-Fi networks............................. 12 7. Using a microSD card........... 13 8. Opening and Switching Applications......
Contents Social Networking.................... 35 Social Networking.................... 35 Adding your account to your phone..................................... 35 Viewing and updating your status . ................................... 35 Removing accounts on your phone..................................... 35 Camera..................................... 36 Getting to know the viewfinder... 36 Using the focus mode.............. 37 Taking a quick photo ............... 37 Once you’ve taken the photo....
Settings.................................... 53 Wireless controls..................... 53 Sound settings......................... 53 Display settings....................... 53 Touch settings......................... 53 Data synchronization . ............. 54 Security & location . ................ 54 To lock your screen by using the Pattern Lock............................ 54 Applications............................. 54 SD card & phone storage......... 55 Date and time..........................
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model GT540 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
• Turn off the phone in any area where you are required by special regulations. For example, do not use your phone in hospitals as it may affect sensitive medical equipment. • Do not handle the phone with wet hands while it is being charged. It may cause an electric shock and can seriously damage your phone. • Do not to charge a handset near flammable material, as the handset can become hot and create a fire hazard.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle, such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance.
Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts that may cause a choking hazard if detached. Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available in all mobile networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. Battery information and care • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging.
Important notice Please check to see if any problems you have encountered with your phone are described in this section, before taking the phone in for service or calling a service representative. 1. Phone memory When available space on your phone memory is less than 10% , your phone can not receive the new message. You need to check your phone memory and delete some data such as applications or messages to make more memory available. To manage the application 1.
power source or, if connected to a power source, how long you were last running on battery power. The body of the screen lists applications or services using battery power from greatest amount to least. 3. Installing an Open Source OS If you install an open source OS on your phone, and do not use the OS provided by the manufacturer, this may cause your phone to malfunction.
Important notice Your phone will boot all the way to the main screen and display "safe mode" in lower left corner. 2. Select Settings> Applications>Manage applications, and choose the application then select an Uninstall icon. 3. After uninstalling the application, turn off and reboot your phone. * Using Hard Reset (Factory Reset) If it does not restore to the original condition, use Hard Reset to initialise your phone.
4. The Status bar displays icons that indicate Wi-Fi status. 8. Opening and Switching Applications 7. Using a microSD card Multi-tasking is easy with Android because open applications keep running even when you open another application. There’s no need to quit an application before opening another. Use and switch among several open applications. Android manages each application, stopping and starting them as needed, to ensure that idle applications don’t consume resources unnecessarily.
Important notice GT540 does not support: - PC Connection via Bluetooth - LG Air Sync (Web Sync, R-Click) - OSP (On Screen Phone) - To-do in Calendar - Memo - E-mail - Java Application User’s guide for PC Suite IV is in Help menu after install PC Suite IV. 1. Use the USB cable that came with your phone to connect the phone to a USB port on your computer. You receive a notification that the USB is connected. 2. Open the Notification drawer and touch USB connected. 3.
Getting to know your phone Earpiece Menu key - Opens options menu and check what options are available. Back key - Returns to the previous screen. Send key - Access to call logs or answers incoming calls. End/Power/Lock key - Ends or rejects a call. - Power ON / OFF Your phone by pressing and holding the key. - Turns off the screen and locks. Home key - Returns to home screen from any screen. T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.indd 15 Microphone 15 2010.7.
Getting to know your phone Volume keys - On the home screen: controls ringer volume. - During a call: controls your earpiece volume. - When playing a track: controls volume continuously. Charger, micro USB cable connector Search key - Search the web and contents in your phone. Camera key - Go to the camera menu directly by pressing and holding the key.
Installing the SIM card and battery Before you can start exploring your new phone, you’ll need to set It up. To insert the SIM card and battery: 1 With the back of the phone facing you, remove the back cover. To remove the back cover, firmly press your thumbs on either side of the back cover, and slide the cover up. T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.indd 17 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. 17 2010.7.
Getting to know your phone 3 I nsert the battery into place by aligning the gold contacts on the phone and the battery, then gently press the battery until it snaps into space. NOTE! If your phone does not connect to a network when you insert a SIM card and turn it on, please contact your service carrier to obtain the details of its access point name. Charging your phone Slide back the cover of the charger connector on the side of your GT540. Insert the charger, and plug it into an electrical outlet.
NOTE: The GT540 has an internal antenna. Be careful not to scratch or damage this rear area, as that will cause loss of performance. 3 Close the slot protection. Installing the memory card To store additional multimedia files such as captured images by using a built-in camera, you must insert a memory card to your phone. To insert a memory card: 1 Turn the phone off before inserting or removing the memory card. Remove the back cover. 2 O pen the slot protection and insert the memory card into the slot.
Getting to know your phone 6 I f you set the pattern lock, input the pattern lock and select Erase Everything. The card will then be formatted and ready to use. NOTE: If there is content on your memory card, the folder structure may be different after formatting since all the files will have been deleted. Tip! If your memory card is already Unmount, you can use the following step to format it. Touch Applications > Settings > SD card & phone storage > Format SD Card. 20 T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.indd 20 2010.
Your Home screen Touch-screen tips Lock and unlock screen • To select an item, touch the centre Whenever your GT540 is not in use, it will return to the lock screen. If you do not use the phone for a while, the home screen or other screen you are viewing, is replaced with the lock screen and then the screen darkens, to conserve the battery. To wake up your phone, press Send, Home, or Power. The lock screen will appear and drag your finger to the right to unlock your home screen.
Your Home screen LG Home Simply swipe your finger to the left or right to view them. You can also customise each panel with widgets, shortcuts, folders, wallpapers, which are shortcuts to your favourite applications, folders and wallpapers. Center panel Left panel Right panel Tip! Small dots at the application tab on the bottom of the screen indicate which panel you’re viewing. 22 T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.indd 22 2010.7.
In your LG home screen, you can view quick keys on the bottom of the screen. The quick keys provide easy, one-touch access to the functions you use the most. Touch the Phone icon to bring up the touch-dialling pad to make a call. T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.indd 23 Touch the Message icon to access the messaging menu. Here, you can create a new message. Touch the Applications icon to open the applications menu. Just touch and slide up or down the screen to scroll through your applications. 23 2010.7.
Your Home screen Android Home Simply swipe your finger to the left or right to view them. You can also customise each panel with widgets, shortcuts, folders, wallpapers, which are shortcuts to your favourite applications, folders and wallpapers. Center panel Left panel Right panel Touch the Applications icon to open the applications menu. Just touch and slide up or down the screen to scroll through your applications. Applications 24 T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.indd 24 2010.7.
Adding widgets to your home screen Getting back to a recently used application You can customise your home screen by adding shortcuts, widgets, folders or Wallpapers to it. For more convenience using your phone, add your favourite widgets on the home screen. NOTE: LG Home and Android Home provide this function. To add an desired icon to your home screen: 1 On the home screen, touch Menu key and select Add. 2 On the Add to Home screen menu, touch the type of item you want to add.
Your Home screen Icon [Status bar] Icon Description Description Flight mode Silent No SIM card Vibrate No signal No SD card Wi-Fi is on and connected to an AP Battery fully charged Wired headset Call forward Call hold Speakerphone Call mute Missed call Bluetooth on Battery is charging Data in Data out Data in and out USB to PC Download Upload Bluetooth connected GPS is acquiring System warning GPS is on Alarm Service message New voicemail Setting message 26 T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.
Google Account Set-up The first time you open the Google application on your phone, you will be required to sign in with your existing Google account. If you do not have a Google account, you’re prompted to create one. Creating your Google account 1 O n the home screen, touch Applications tab to open the applications menu. 2 Tap Google Mail, and tap Next>Create to start the Google Mail set up wizard then set it up.
Calls Making a call 1 Touch to open the keypad. 2 Enter the number on the keypad. To delete a digit, touch the Clear icon . 3 Touch the Call icon to make a call. 4 To end a call, touch End. TIP! To enter “+” to make international calls, touch and hold down . Calling your contacts 1 T ouch to open your contacts. 2 Scroll through the contact list or enter the first letter(s) of the contact you want to call by touching Search.
Voicemail – Set up your voicemail number. Call forwarding – You can configure how your calls are forwarded when you’re on the phone, when you don’t answer, and so on. Choose from Always forward, Forward when busy, Forward when unanswered, or Forward when unreachable. Then enter the number to forward to. NOTE: Diverting calls will incur charges. Please contact your network operator for details. Call barring – Select when you would like calls to be barred. Enter the call barring password.
Contacts You can add contacts on your phone and synchronise them with the contacts in your Google Account or other accounts that support syncing contacts. Searching for a contact There are two ways to search for a contact: On the Home screen 1 On the home screen, touch Contacts to open your contacts. 2 Touch Search and enter the contact name using the keypad. TIP! To search by group, touch the Contacts tab at the top of the screen and select Groups. This will display a list of all your groups.
Messaging/E-mail Messaging Your GT540 combines SMS and MMS into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. Sending a message 1 T ouch Messaging icon on the home screen, and touch New message to open a blank message. 2 Enter a mobile phone number in the To field. As you enter the phone number, matching contacts appear. You can touch a suggested recipient or continue entering the phone number. You can add multiple contacts. NOTE: You will be charged for a text message for every person you send the message to.
Messaging/E-mail text. Touch to turn on T9 predictive Tap to change between the number, symbol, and text keypads. Touch and hold to view the Editor Settings, Keypad types, Writing Language, Input Method, and User Dictionary. Use to scroll through the different keyboards in each text entry mode (e.g., uppercase or lowercase letters). To enter a space, touch . T9 mode The T9 mode uses a built-in dictionary to recognise the words you’re writing based on the sequence of keys you’ve touched.
Sending an email using your new account Changing your message settings 1 T ouch Email icon on the home screen, and then touch Compose icon to open a new blank message. 2 Enter the recipient’s address, then write your message. You can also attach images, videos, audio files, and various document file formats. 3 Touch Send icon to send your email. Your GT540 message settings are predefined, so you can send messages immediately. You can change the settings based on your preferences.
Messaging/E-mail Auto-retrieve – Activate to retrieve messages automatically. Roaming auto-retrieve – Activate to retrieve messages while roaming. Set priority – Choose the priority level of your MMS. Validity period – Choose how long your message is stored in the message center. Creation mode Restricted: In this mode, the MMS Client device only creates and sends messages with content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
Social Networking Social Networking With your phone, you can enjoy the social networking and manage your micro-blog in on-line communities. You can update your current status and view your friends’ status updates real-time. You can add your Facebook, Twitter or Bebo accounts to your phone. If you don’t have an account, you can visit their sites to set it up. NOTE: An additional costs may be incurred when connecting and using online services. Check your data charges with your network provider.
Camera Getting to know the viewfinder rightness – This defines and controls of the amount of sunlight B entering the image. Slide the brightness indicator along the bar, towards “-” for a lower brightness image, or towards “+” for a higher brightness image. Zoom – Zoom in or zoom out. Alternatively you can use the side volume keys. Settings – Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings. Gallery – This enables you to access your saved photos from within the camera mode.
TIP! You can close all the shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen. Just touch the centre of the viewfinder once. To recall the options, touch the screen again. Using the focus mode You can select the focus mode as following options; Auto Focus – Set the camera to focus automatically. Macro – Macro mode allows you to take extreme close-ups. If you are trying to take a close-up shot but the focus box remains red, try turning the macro mode on.
Camera Touch to edit the name of the selected picture. Touch to edit the image using various tools. Touch to view a gallery of your saved photos. Touch to delete the image. Touch to take another photo immediately. Your current photo will be saved. Touch to return to the previous menu. Using the advanced settings In the viewfinder, touch to open all advanced options. You can change the camera setting by scrolling the wheel. After selecting the option, touch the Back key.
Shutter sound – Select one of the four shutter sounds. GEO-Tagging – Activate to use your phone’s location-based services. Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location. If you upload tagged pictures to a blog that supports geotagging, you can see the pictures displayed on a map. NOTE: This function is only available when GPS is active. Hide icons – Choose the camera setting icons to hide manually or automatically. Blink detection – Choose On to check the closed eyes at the after capture.
Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Brightness – This defines and controls of the amount of sunlight entering the Video. Slide the brightness indicator along the bar, towards “-” for a lower brightness Video, or towards “+” for a higher brightness Video. Zoom – Zoom in or zoom out. Alternatively you can use the side volume keys. Before starting record a video, you can use the zoom function. You can not control the zoom function during recording. Settings – Touch this icon to open the settings menu.
Shooting a quick video 1 P ress and hold the camera key on the right side of the phone. 2 Then, switch to . 3 The video camera’s viewfinder will appear on the screen. 4 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the video. 5 Press the capture button once to start recording. 6 R EC will appear at the bottom of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video. 7 Touch on the screen to stop recording.
Video camera TIP! When choosing MMS duration, the Video quality will be set as QCIF and you can shoot longer videos. Audio recording – Choose Mute to record a video without sound. Hide icons – Select whether to hide the icons in the video camera menu automatically or manually. Recorded video – Choose from On, Hold, and Off. If you select On, after recorded video screen is shown for 1 second, and it goes to the preview right away. Reset – Reset all the video camera settings.
Your photos and videos Editing your photos You can do lots of great things to your photos to change them, add to them, or liven them up. 1 Open the photo you want to edit, then touch the Menu key. 2 Touch Edit to change your photo: Rotate & Flip – Rotate or flip your photo for fun or a better view. C rop – Crop your photo. Choose a square or circular crop area, then move your finger across the screen to select the area.
Your photos and videos 3 T ouch OK to save the transition. Touch Apply to apply the currently selected transition. Choose Apply To All to apply the currently selected transition to all video files in the storyboard. Adding subtitles 1 O pen the video you want to edit. 2 Select Edit , then select to add subtitles to the video. 3 Touch , then pause playback to set the start point for text appearance. 4 Touch Start, then choose the text style. Enter your text using the keypad, then select Done.
Multimedia You can store multimedia files to a memory card to have easy access to all your image and video files. Touch Applications tab, then select Gallery. You can open a list of catalogue bars that store all your multimedia files. Note: Make sure you install a memory card into the phone to save photos and access all your pictures. Without a memory card, the phone will not display any photos or videos. There are seven catalogue bars as shown below. All : Displays all your pictures and videos.
Multimedia 2 I mport Files – Add media files to the storyboard. You can add up to 32 media files. 3 C lip Manager – Manage the added media files. If no media files were added, the button is disabled. 4 Preview – Preview the video file you created. 5 Save – Save the video file you created. 6 A dd Text – Add a text frame into storyboard. You must touch first to edit the video. – Touch to select all the files, but the maximum is 32 files. – Touch to deselect all the files.
NOTE: Java game and application installation are only possible through the Web. Transferring files using USB mass storage devices To transfer files using USB devices: 1 Connect the GT540 to a PC using a USB cable. 2 Choose Settings > SD Card & Phone Storage > Activate Mass Storage Only. 3 In the status bar, drag the USB icon. 4 Choose USB Connected and Mount. 5 You can view the mass storage contents on your PC and transfer the files. NOTE: You need to install and SD card first.
Multimedia Using the radio Your GT540 has a built-in FM radio so you can tune in to your favourite stations and listen on the go. Searching for stations You can tune in to radio stations by searching for them manually or automatically. They will then be saved to specific channel numbers, so you don’t have to keep re-tuning in. You can store up to 48 channels on your phone. To tune in automatically 1 On the home screen, touch Applications tab and select FM radio. 2 Touch the Menu key.
Google applications 1 F irst, set up a Google account. Enter your user name and password. 2 After signing in, your contacts, email, and calendar in your Google account will automatically synchronise with your GT540. Tip! If you change your Google account after signing in, or you want to log out, please use the below step: Applications > Settings > Applications > Manage applications > Google Apps > Clear data. Google Maps Check your current location and traffic and receive directions to your destination.
Utilities Setting your alarm Using your calculator 1 O n the home screen, touch Applications tab and select Alarm Clock. 2 If you want to add a new alarm, touch New alarm. There are preset alarms you can activate. 3 Touch to checkmark to turn on the alarm, and set the time you want the alarm to sound. After you set the time, the GT540 will let you know how much time is left before the alarm sounds. 4 Choose a ringtone, and turn on Vibrate, if you want. Set the repeat.
6 A lso, touch Where, then enter the location. 7 If you would like to add a note to your event, touch Description and enter the details. 8 If you want to repeat the alarm, set Repetition, and set Reminders, if necessary. 9 Touch Done to save the event in the calendar. A coloured square in the calendar will mark all days that have saved events. An alarm will sound at the event start time to help you stay organised. Voice recorder Use the voice recorder to record voice memos or other audio files.
The Web Accessing the Web 1 O n the home screen, touch Applications tab and select Browser. 2 You will move to the website. NOTE: Additional charges apply when connecting to these services and downloading content. Check data charges with your network provider. Changing Web browser settings Touch the Menu key then select More > Settings. You can change the page layout (e.g., text size, text encoding), change the home page, manage cache, cookie, and security settings, and so on.
Settings On the home screen, touch Applications tab then scroll and touch Settings. Wireless controls Here, you can manage Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Also, you can set Mobile networks, Airplane mode. Wi-Fi – Touch to checkmark: Turns on Wi-Fi to connect to available Wi-Fi networks. Wi-Fi settings – Set network notification, or add a Wi-Fi network. Bluetooth – Touch to checkmark: Turns on Bluetooth to connect to Bluetooth devices. Bluetooth settings – Set device name & discoverable, scan for other devices.
Settings Data synchronization Select which applications are synchronised. Security & location My location Checkmark to include your position when using Google search and other Google services. When you check this option, you’re asked whether you consent to allowing Google to use your location when providing these services. Use wireless networks – If you check Use wireless networks, your phone will determine your approximate location by using Wi-Fi and mobile networks.
Manage Applications – Manage and remove installed applications. Development – Set options for application development, such as USB Debugging, Stay Awake, and Allow Mock Locations. SD card & phone storage SD Card – Check total space and available space. Touch Unmount SD card for safe removal. Format the SD card, if necessary. Internal phone storage – Check the Available space. Choose Factory Data Reset if you want to delete all data from the phone. Date and time Set date, time, time zone, and formats.
Wi-Fi Wireless Manager allows you to manage Internet connections to your phone’s Wi-Fi (a wireless LAN). It allows the phone to connect to local wireless networks or access the Internet wirelessly. Wi-Fi is faster and has a greater range than Bluetooth wireless technology. It allows fast emailing and Internet browsing. NOTE: The GT540 supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK security. If your Wi-Fi service provider or network administrator sets encryption for network security, fill in the key in the pop-up window.
3 H ow to save the Wi-Fi profile 1) Select the Add Wi-Fi Network menu at the bottom of Wi-Fi Networks, then enter the SSID and Security Type. 2) After connecting to an AP with this security type, the profile will be saved automatically. 3. How to obtain the MAC address To set up a connection in some wireless networks with MAC filters, you may need to enter the MAC address of your GT540 into the router.
Software update Phone Software update LG Mobile Phone Software update from internet For more information on using this function, please visit the http:// update.lgmobile.com or http://www. lg.com/common/index.jsp → select country → Support. This Feature allows you to update the firmware of your phone to the latest version conveniently from the internet without the need to visit a service center.
Accessories There are a variety of accessories available for your mobile phone, which may be sold separately. Select these options according to your personal communication needs. Consult your local dealer for availability. (Items described below may be optional.) Charger Data cable Connect your GT540 and PC. Battery User Guide Learn more about your GT540. Stereo headset NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty.
Ambient Temperatures Max: +55°C (discharging), +45°C (charging) Min: -10°C GT540 60 T540_Iran_E_1.0_0717.indd 60 2010.7.
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to correct yourself. Message Possible causes Possible solutions SIM error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection Signal is weak. Outside GSM network area. Move closer to a window or into an open area. Check the service provider coverage map.
Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible solutions Press the On/Off key for at least two seconds. Phone cannot be turned on. On/Off key not pressed long enough. Battery empty. Battery contacts dirty. Battery totally empty. Charge battery. Temperature out of range. Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait a few moments, then charge again. Contact problem. Check the power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts, and clean them if necessary. No outlet voltage.
5_115 memo_Gray.indd 2 Memo 2009.12.
Memo 5_115 memo_Gray.indd 1 2009.12.
5_115 memo_Gray.indd 2 Memo 2009.12.
Memo 5_115 memo_Gray.indd 1 2009.12.
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﹼﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ. ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ. ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ. ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ. ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻼﹰ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ. ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻻ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ. ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻠ ﹰﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ SIM ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ. ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ .GSM ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ.
ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ +55 :ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ( +45 ،ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺷﺤﻦ( ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ-10 :ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ 2010.7.17 1:2:3 PM T540_Iran_Arab_1.0_0717.
ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ،ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ) .ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ GT540 ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ .GT540 ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ LGﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ. • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ.
ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ LGﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ http://update. lgmobile.com or http://www.lg.com/ → common/index.jspﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ → ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ. ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
3ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺿﻊ Wi-Fi (1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ Wi-Fi ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ،Wi-Fiﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ SSIDﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ. (2ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ APﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ. .3ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ MAC ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ،MAC ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ MAC ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ GT540ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ.
Wi-Fi ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟـ Wi-Fiﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ )ﺷﺒﻜﺔ LANﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( .ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﹰ. Wi-Fiﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻳﺪﻋﻢ GT540ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ WEPﻭ WPA/ .WPA2-PSKﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Wi-Fiﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻠﺊ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻖ .
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ – SDﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ .ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ. ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،SDﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﻋﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ. ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ – ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ DivX VOD ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ .DivX VOD ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ /http://vod.divx.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ – ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ Googleﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ Googleﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟـ Googleﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ،ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ Wi-Fiﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ Wi-Fiﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ، ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ. – Wi-Fiﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ Wi-Fiﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – Wi-Fiﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ .Wi-Fi ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ.
ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ. 2ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ. ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ. 4ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ 5ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
9ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ .ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎ ﹰ. ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﹼ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﹼ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﹼﺒﻪ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ .ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ،ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺳﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ GT540ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ،ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ.
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Google 1ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ .Googleﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. 2ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Googleﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻊ .GT540 ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Google ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ :ﺍﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ<ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ<ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ<ﺇﺩﺍﺭ ﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ<ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ .ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﹴﺬ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻌ ﹼﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 48ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ. ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ .FM 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﻧﻌﻢ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ، ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ.
ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USBﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ :USB 1ﺻﻞ GT540ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ .USB 2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ< ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ. 3ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ .USB 4ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ .USB 5ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ .ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،SDﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USBﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ – ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ 2 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ 32ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ. ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ – ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ 3 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ. 4 ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ -ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ. ﺣﻔﻆ – ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 5 ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ. 6 ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ – ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ. ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. – ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻫﻮ 32ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﹰ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﻓﺒﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﻛﻞ :ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 3ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ .ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ. ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺪﺀ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻢ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ. 1ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ: ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﺐ – ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ. ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ – ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ.
ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ. ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ. ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ،ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 1ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺳﺘﺬﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ :ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺛﻢ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ . ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎﹰ ،ﺻ ﹼﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ﹰﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﹰﺓ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ RECﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﹰﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﹰﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " "-ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﻮ ﹰﻋﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " "+ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮ ﹰﻋﺎ. ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ – ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ .ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ .ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ – ﻧﺸﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ .ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﹴ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ GPSﻧﺸﻄﺔ. ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ. ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ. ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ .ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘ ﹰﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔﹰ .
ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ .ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ. ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﻲ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ،ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " "-ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﻮ ﹰﻋﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " "+ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮ ﹰﻋﺎ. ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ – ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ .ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ.
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻚ 1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ. 2ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 3ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻚ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ 1ﻓﻲ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ) SNﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ( ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ. 2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ. 3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ > ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ < ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ـ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ – ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ( .ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ. 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 3ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ GT540ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ T9 ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻯ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﹼﺮﺭ ﻭﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﹰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ )ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ(. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ . ﻭﺿﻊ T9 ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ T9ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺎ .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ GT540ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ SMSﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ MMSﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ. 2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ .ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Googleﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ. ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ 1 2 ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ: ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ. 2ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ .
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ – ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎﹰ ،ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ ،ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﹼﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ. ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ .ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ. ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ـ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ .ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ.
ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 1 2 3 4 ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ . ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ " "+ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ . ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ. 1ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ)ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ( ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Google ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Googleﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ Googleﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Googleﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎ ﹰ. ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Google 1 2 3 4 5 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ،Gmailﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ<ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Google Mailﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ Wi-Fiﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 26 2010.7.
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ .ﻟﻠﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ LGﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ Androidﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ: 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ Androidﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ 24 2010.7.17 1:2:12 PM T540_Iran_Arab_1.0_0717.
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ LGﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺳﻬﻼﹰ ﻭﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﹰ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻫﻨﺎ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. 23 2010.7.17 1:2:13 PM T540_Iran_Arab_1.0_0717.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ LGﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. 22 2010.7.17 1:2:14 PM T540_Iran_Arab_1.0_0717.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ • ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ،ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ. • ﻻ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ؛ ﻓﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻑ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﹴﹺ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ .ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GT540ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ 5ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ .ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﹰﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰ ﳊﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ. ﺍﳌﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ<ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ<ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔSD ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ<ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ. 20 2010.7.17 1:2:14 PM T540_Iran_Arab_1.0_0717.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ GT540ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ. ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻲ ،ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 3ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ. ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ: 1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ .ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ. 2ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ 3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ! ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ،ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ. ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣ ﹼﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .GT540ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ،ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ GT540ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ .
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ .ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ: 1ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ. ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 2ﹺ .SIMﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ. 17 2010.7.17 1:2:18 PM T540_Iran_Arab_1.
ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ،ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ USBﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﹰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ. ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ:ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ. ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ :ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ :ﺗﺤﻜﻢﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ /ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ. ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ. ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،LCDﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ microSDﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﻟﻤﺲ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ."USB ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺛﻨﺎﺀ ،ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ microSDﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ،ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ microSDﻛﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ. ﲢﺬﻳﺮ! ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻭﺇﻻ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ،ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ < SDﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SD .8ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﹸﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺮﹰﺍ ﺳﻬﻼﹰ ﻣﻊ Androidﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺁﺧﺮ .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ .3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ. * ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔﺍﳌﺼﻨﹼﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﺟﻮﻋﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ + ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ +ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﳌﺪﺓ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
.2ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺮﺕ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺃﺧﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ،ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪ ﹰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. .3ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ Open Source OS .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ. .1ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ، 10%ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ .
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ • ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ LGﻓﻘﻂ. ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ LG ﹼ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ. ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﹼ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ .
ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻴﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ ،ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻚ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﺎ ﹰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ. ﺗﺠﻨﹼﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌ ﹼﺮﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ.
• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺗﺒﺎ ﹰﻋﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﺭ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﹶﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ.
ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ .ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘ ﹼﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ. ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )(SAR ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ GT540ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .
ﺍﳊﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ 54 ..................................... ﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ 54 .............................................. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 54 ........................................... ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SDﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ55 ................. ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ 55 .................................... ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ 55 ....................................... ﺑﺤﺚ55 ...................................................... ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ55 .................................. ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ55 .
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ36 ..................................................... ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ36 .................. ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﹼﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﹼ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ37 ....................... ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ 37 ......................... ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ37 .......................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ 38 ............ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ39 ......................... ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USBﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ47 ....................... ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ 47 ..................................
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ 6 .............. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ10 ........................................ .1ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ10 .................................. .2ﲢﺴﲔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ10 ............ .3ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ 11Open Source OS .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ 11 ....... .5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 11 ......................................... .6ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ 12 ......... Wi-Fi .7ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 12 .......microSD .
ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ GT540ﻣﻦ ،LG ﹼ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ. 2010.7.17 1:2:22 PM T540_Iran_Arab_1.0_0717.
ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ GT540 • ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. • ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻔﻮﻓﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ. • .Copyright ©2010 LG Electronics, Inc ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ LG .ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ LG ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ LG Groupﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ .ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ.
5_115 memo_Gray.indd 2 Memo 2009.12.
Memo 5_115 memo_Gray.indd 1 2009.12.
ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ. ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺜﯿﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺩﻣﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺳﯿﻢ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ .
ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ +55 :ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺩﺷﺎﺭژ( 45+ ،ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺷﺎﺭژ( ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ -10 :ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ 60 2010.7.17 12:53:34 PM T540_Iran_1.0_0717.
ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﯾﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﯿﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ) .ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ GT540ﻭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ GT540 ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﯾﻮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: • ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻞ LGﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ LGﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ،ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ http://update.lgmobile.com http://www.lg.com/common/index. jspﺑﺎﺯﺩﯾﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﯾﯿﺪ→ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ → ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ. ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ،ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
(4ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ :IP/DNSﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ DHCPﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺴﺘﺎ ،ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﺩﺭﺱ IPﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ DNSﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ IPﺍﯾﺴﺘﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. 3ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ Wi-Fi (1ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ Wi-Fiﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی Wi-Fiﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ SSIDﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ.
Wi-Fi ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ Wi-Fiﺗﻠﻔﻦ )ﯾﮏ LAN ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ Wi- Fi .ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﺳﯿﻊ ﺗﺮی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﭙﺬﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ GT540 :ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ WEPﻭ WPA/ WPA2-PSKﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ – ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﯿﺮﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭی. ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ – ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ – ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ،ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺯﺩﺍﯾﯽ ،USBﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ،Googleﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻫﺎ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻟﯿﺒﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ -ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﻦ – ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی Googleﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ،Googleﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﯿﺰ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﯿﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺁﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ Googleﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ Wi-Fiﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ،ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. – Wi-Fiﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ: Wi-Fiﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی Wi-Fi ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ – Wi-Fiﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ Wi-Fiﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ.
ﻭﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ 1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ،ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ، ﺭﺍ 1ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺳﺎﺯی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ، ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ 2ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ، ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ، ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
6 7 8 9 ﮐﺠﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺷﺮﺡ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﯾﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ،ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﯾﮏ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ، ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ.
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی Google 1ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Googleﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. 2ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ،ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ،ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Googleﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ GT540ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ،ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Googleﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﯾﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ،ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ: ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ<ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ<ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ<ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ<ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ،ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺬ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ،ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﻭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ،ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 3ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﯾﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ،ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
2ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺯی ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﯿﺮﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ، ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯی Javaﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻭﺏ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﭙﺬﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ USB ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی :USB GT540 1ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ،USBﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ – ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی 2 ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺗﺎ 32ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺪﯾﺮ ﮐﻠﯿﭗ – ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ 3 ﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﯿﭻ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. 4 ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ – ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ – ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ 5 ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 6 ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ – ﯾﮏ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻭ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ. ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ. ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﯿﭻ ﻋﮑﺲ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﳕﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ.
ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ 1ﯾﮏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ، ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ. 3ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ،ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ،ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ،ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺯﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺯﯾﺎﺩی ﻫﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ، ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﺒﺨﺸﯿﺪ. 1ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﻋﮑﺲ ،ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ: ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻭ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ – ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺵ – ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ – ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ،MMS ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﺩی ﻭ MMSﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﻝ ،MMSﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ QCIFﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ، ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ -ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ.
ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻮﺭی 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ ،ﻋﺪﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ. RECﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﯾﮏ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ " "-ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ،ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ " "+ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ. ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ – ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی – ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ 2x2 ،ﯾﺎ 3x3ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ -ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻭﺑﻼگ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﹰ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ، ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﺪﻭﺭ ،ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ .ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی 1 2 ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ؛ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ – ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ -ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺎﮐﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ )ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ( ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ .
ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ " "-ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ،ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ " "+ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ. ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ – ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﮔﺎﻟﺮی – ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ .
7ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﻭﯾﺠﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﮐﺮﺩ ،ﻭﯾﺠﺖ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ .ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ، ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ،ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ،ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭘﯿﺎﻡﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ :ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ،MMSﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی Core MMﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ :ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ،MMSﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی Core MMﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ،Wi-Fiﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ Wi-Fiﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﯾﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. 1ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ. 2ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ. 3ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ :ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ،ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ،ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻭ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﭙﻢ.
ﭘﯿﺎﻡﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﺸﮕﻮی T9 ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻋﺪﺩی ،ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ، ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ،ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﭘﯿﺎﻡﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ GT540ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ SMSﻭ MMSﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ 1ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ،ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ، ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی ﯾﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ .ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Googleﺧﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ،ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ 1 2 ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ: ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ 1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 2ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ – ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻏﯿﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﯾﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻫﺪﺍﯾﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ، ﻫﺪﺍﯾﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﯾﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﯾﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ .ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ. ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ – ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .
ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻗﻢ ،ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ،ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 1 2 3 4 ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ " "+ﺟﻬﺖ ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﳌﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ. ﺍﳌﻠﻠﯽ، ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Google ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ Googleﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Googleﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Google ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک Google 1 2 3 4 5 ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺭﻭی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ Googleﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻌﺪی<ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ Googleﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ]ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ[ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ Wi-Fiﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 2010.7.
ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭﯾﺠﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ،ﻭﯾﺠﺖ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ،ﻭﯾﺠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ LGﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ Androidﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ: 1ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ.
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ Android ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﯾﺠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ، ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ 24 2010.7.17 12:53:47 PM T540_Iran_1.0_0717.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ،LGﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ،ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﮏ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ،ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ LG ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﯾﺠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. 22 2010.7.17 12:53:48 PM T540_Iran_1.0_0717.
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ،ﻭﺳﻂ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻼﯾﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮک ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ GT540ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ 5ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ، ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ GT540 :ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻧﱳ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﺍﺵ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻧﺮﺳﺎﻧﯿﺪ ،ﭼﻮﻥ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﯿﻔﺘﺪ. 3ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ. ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ،ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ: 1ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ.
ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ 3ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ،ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺎ ﺑﯿﻔﺘﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﳕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﲤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ GT540ﺗﻌﺒﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ .ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ.
ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی: 1ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ،ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ. 2ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎ ﺑﯿﻔﺘﺪ. ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. 17 2010.7.
ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ :ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍیﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﯾﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ :ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍیﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ :ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ،ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﯾﮑﯽ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ micro USB ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦﮐﻠﯿﺪ ،ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ.
ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ/ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﻪﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﯿﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ USB ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ ،ﯾﮏ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﮐﺎﺭﺕ microSDﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﯿﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ microSD ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ، ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ،LCDﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ،ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﳕﻮﺩ. ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ! ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻏﯿﺮﺍﯾﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ،ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ، ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < SDﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ< ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ SDﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. .
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﯿﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ .2ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ< ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ<ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ. .3ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. * ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺨﺖ )ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﺮﻧﮕﺸﺖ، ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
.2ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ،ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﯿﺮﻭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﯿﺮﻭﯾﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ،ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﯿﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ،ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. .
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﯿﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ، ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ. .1ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻀﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 10ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ .
• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ. ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ،ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﮑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ • ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ، ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ ﭘﺎﺭک ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. • ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮏ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﯿﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﯾﻮﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ. • ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮐﯿﺴﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ .ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ،ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ.
• ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍ ﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ،ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ. ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ،ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﯿﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ. • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺪﯾﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ. • ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﻫﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺮﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ. ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ )(SAR ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ GT540 ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .
ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ 54 ............................... ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ54 .............................................. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ55 ............................................... SDﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 55 ........... ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 55 ..................................... ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻣﱳ 55 ................................ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ 55 ............................................... ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ55 ................................. ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ55 ........
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ 36 ........................................................ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ36 ................................... ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ 37 .................. ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی 37 ............................. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﯿﺪ37 .......................، ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ38 .......... ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ39 ...... ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ 47 ...................USB ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ47 ..........................................
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ6 ... ﺍﻃﻼﻋﯿﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ10 ........................................... .1ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ10 .................................. .2ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی10 .................. .3ﻧﺼﺐ ﯾﮏ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ 11 ..... .4ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ 11 .5ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺨﺖ11 .............................................. .6ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی 12 ..... Wi-Fi .7ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ 12 ....... microSD .
ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ GT540ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﯾﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ LGﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺳﯿﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. 2010.7.17 12:53:57 PM T540_Iran_1.0_0717.
GT540ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ • ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ. • ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ،ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺑﯿﻨﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. • ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ©.LG Electronics, Inc 2010 ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ LG .ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ LGﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ LG Group ﻭ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﯿﺖ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
